2007 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2007 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M 1. ... CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, ... Part No. 15865148 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 71Restraint System Check ......................... 90

Features and Controls ................................ 93Keys ....................................................... 95Doors and Locks .................................. 103Windows ............................................... 109Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 111Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 115Mirrors .................................................. 134

OnStar® System ................................... 139Storage Areas ...................................... 143Sunroof ................................................ 147

Instrument Panel ....................................... 149Instrument Panel Overview ................... 152Climate Controls ................................... 170Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 177Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 194Audio System(s) ................................... 206

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 237Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 238Towing ................................................. 274

2007 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 287Service ................................................. 289Fuel ...................................................... 291Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 296Headlamp Aiming ................................. 327Bulb Replacement ................................ 330Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 335Tires ..................................................... 336Appearance Care .................................. 370Vehicle Identification ............................. 379

Electrical System .................................. 380Capacities and Specifications ................ 386

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 389Maintenance Schedule .......................... 390

Customer Assistance Information ............. 411Customer Assistance and Information ..... 412Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 428

Index .......................................................... 433

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename HHR are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15865148 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Power Seat ................................................... 9Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 11Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 17

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 63Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 66Airbag System .............................................. 71

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 79What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 80Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89Restraint System Check ............................... 90

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 91

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s seatheight adjuster is located on the outboardside of the seat.

To raise the seat, move the lever upwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.To lower the seat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.

Power Seat

If the vehicle has a power seat, the control usedto operate it is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat. To adjust the seat, do any of thefollowing:• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding

the control forward or rearward.• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion

by holding the front of the control up or down.• Raise or lower the entire seat by holding the

rear of the control up or down.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control andPower Lumbar shown

9

Power Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the control islocated on the outboard side of the driver’s seatcushion.

To increase support, press and hold the front ofthe control. To decrease support, press andhold the rear of the control. Keep in mind that asyour seating position changes, as it may duringlong trips, so should the position of your lumbarsupport. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the driver’s andpassenger’s heatedseat buttons are locatedon the climate controlpanel below thefan switch.

Press the button once to turn the heated seat tothe high setting. Both lights below the heated seatsymbol will come on. Press the button a secondtime and the heated seat will go to the low setting.The bottom light will come on to indicate thatthe setting is on low. Press the button a third timeto turn the heated seat off.

The heated seat feature will need to be turned oneach time the ignition is turned off and back onagain.

Driver’s side buttonshown, Passenger’sside button similar

10

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

The seats have reclining seatbacks. The leverused to operate them is located on the outboardside of the seats. Lift the lever to release theseatback. Move the seatback to where you want itand release the lever to lock the seatback inplace. Press rearward on the seatback to be sureit is locked into place.

Passenger’s Side Reclining Lever shown,Driver’s Side similar

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the occupant’shead. This position reduces the chance of aneck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint upto raise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback, andpush the restraint down.Only the front headrestraints are adjustable.

Both the front and rear head restraints can beremoved. Press the button, located on the top ofthe seatback, and pull the restraint out fromthe seatback. Do not remove the head restraint ifsomeone will be sitting in that seat while thevehicle is moving.

13

Passenger Folding SeatbackYour vehicle has a front passenger seat thatfolds flat.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 74 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 269.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

To fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Move the front passenger seat rearward toensure there is enough room to fold theseatback forward. See Manual Seats onpage 8 for more information. The headrestraint may need to be removed if the seatis not able to be moved fully rearward. Ifremoving the head restraint, store it so that itwill not move while the vehicle is in motion.

2. Make sure that the seatback is in an uprightposition. Use the recliner lever located on theoutboard side of the seat to move theseatback to the upright position.

14

3. Use one of two levers to fold the seat flat.The levers are located on the rear of theseat near the bottom of either side of the seat.Pull up on either lever and fold the seatforward until the seatback disengages. Thiscan most easily be down from the rear seats.

4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locksin the folded position. Pull up on the seatbackto be sure it is locked.

15

To raise the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Pull up on one of the two levers located onthe rear of the seat near the bottom of eitherside of the seat.

2. Push the seatback up until it is in a lockedposition.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

16

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatThe seatbacks can be folded flat so that they areat the same level as the rear cargo area. Thisallows more cargo space.

To lower the rear seatback(s), do the following:

1. Move the front seat forward and/or putthe front seatback in an upright position so itdoes not interfere with folding the rearseatback forward.

2. Open the rear door while the vehicle isparked.

3. The rear head restraint may need to beremoved to ensure that it does not interferewith the front seat when the front seat ismoved back in place. If removed, store thehead restraint where it cannot move while thevehicle is in motion.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

4. Move the safety belt out of the way beforelowering the seatback. Do not let the safetybelt get caught between the seatback and seatcushion as the seatback is folded.

17

5. Pull up on the knoblocated on the top ofthe seatback on theoutboard side torelease theseatback. With yourother hand, pull theseatback forward.

6. Keep folding the seatback forward until itlies flat.

18

To raise the rear seatback(s), do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

1. Lift the seatback up and push rearward untilyou hear a click. Make sure the safety belthas not gotten twisted or lodged between theseat and the inside panel of the vehicle.The release knob on the top of the seatbackhas a red ring. If the seatback is not fullylatched this ring will be visible. Push on theseatback until the ring is not visible.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always pull forward on thetop of the seatback at the area of the latchto be sure it is locked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 180 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 180.

20

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

21

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

22

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

23

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

24

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

25

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

26

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

27

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

28

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

29


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

30


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up just bypushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

38

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

39

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip.

41

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 91.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

42

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

45

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure thechild is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

53

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

54

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

55

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be attachedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

56

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

57

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchorsfor the rear seats,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thestorage compartmentand the cargo matbehind the rear seats.

Rear Seat

Front Passenger Seatwith Rear Seat

Delete Only

58

The top tether anchors are located in a storagecompartment behind the rear seats. Lift thelid of the storage compartment to access theanchors. You may have to fold back the cargo matto access the storage compartment and the toptether anchors. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

If the vehicle does not have rear seats, there willbe an exposed top tether anchor for the frontpassenger position located on the floor behind thefront passenger’s seat.

Vehicles with Rear Seats Vehicles without Rear Seats

59

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if your vehicle has rear seats,if a national or local law requires that the toptether be attached, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tethermust be attached. There is no place to attach thetop tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 53for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured



or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

60

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

61

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. For vehicles with rear seats, find thestorage compartments behind the rearseats. You may have to fold backthe cargo mat to access the storagecompartment and top tether anchors.

2.2. Lift the lid of the storage compartmentsto access the top tether anchors.

2.3. For vehicles without rear seats, find thetop tether anchor.

2.4. If the position you are using has anadjustable head restraint, raise it.

2.5. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

62

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether under thehead restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether around thehead restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

63

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

64

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

65

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 53.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 82 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 182 formore information on this including importantsafety information.


{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


66




{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This is



because the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


67

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no toptether anchor at the right front seating position. Donot secure a child seat in this position if anational or local law requires that the top tether beanchored or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that the top tether must beanchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56 if the child restrainthas a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 82. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 182.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

68

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

69

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat andyour child restraint manufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer tothe instructions that came with the childrestraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56.


9. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

70

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the garnish trim near theceiling and the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

71

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

72

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 43 or Infants and Young Children onpage 46.

73

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 181 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

74

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

75

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the persondirectly behind that passenger, it is located inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

76

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronicfrontal sensor which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph(16 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 25 to 30 mph (40 to 49 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.

77

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 71 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Aside impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity of theimpact.

78

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

79

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or thegarnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for vehicles with roof–mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

80

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again,turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 423.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatyour airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

81

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. A passengerairbag status indicator on the instrument panel willbe visible when you turn your ignition key toSTART or RUN.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou are using remote start to start your vehiclefrom a distance, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check is complete, eitherthe word ON or the word OFF, or the symbolfor on or the symbol for off will be visible.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 182.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

United States Canada

82


{CAUTION:





guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


83


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.




guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


84

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• There is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 66.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

85

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

86

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 181 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 89 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

87

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 430.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

88

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 412.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling andpillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 412.

89

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 373for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the roof-mounted side impact airbagcovering (if equipped) on the garnish trim andceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have toreplace the airbag module in the steeringwheel, both the airbag module and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’sairbag, or the side impact airbag module,garnish trim and the ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

90

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 181.

91

✍ NOTES

92

Keys .............................................................. 95Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 97Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 98Doors and Locks ........................................ 103

Door Locks ................................................ 103Power Door Locks ..................................... 104Delayed Locking ........................................ 104Automatic Door Lock ................................. 105Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 105Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 105Lockout Protection ..................................... 106Liftgate ...................................................... 106

Windows ...................................................... 109Power Windows ........................................ 110Sun Visors ................................................ 111

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 111Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 111PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 113PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 114

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 115New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 115Ignition Positions ....................................... 116Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 119Starting the Engine .................................... 119Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 121Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 122Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 125Parking Brake ........................................... 127Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 128Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 130Parking Your Vehicle ................................. 130Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 131Engine Exhaust ......................................... 132Running the Engine While Parked ............. 133

Section 2 Features and Controls

93

Mirrors ......................................................... 134Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 134Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 134Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Compass ........................................ 136Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 138Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 138

OnStar® System .......................................... 139

Storage Areas ............................................. 143Glove Box ................................................. 143Cupholder(s) .............................................. 143Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 143Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 143Rear Storage Area .................................... 143Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ... 144Roof Rack System .................................... 146Convenience Net ....................................... 147

Sunroof ....................................................... 147

Section 2 Features and Controls

94

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

95

One key is used for theignition and the driver’sdoor lock.

The key has a transponder in the key head thatmatches a decoder in the vehicle’s steeringcolumn. If a replacement key or any additionalkeys are needed, you must purchase it from yourdealer.

Keep the bar code tag that came with the originalkeys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need anew key made.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 418for more information.

96

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. Ifthe transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter towork, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 98.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

97

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlockedfrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m)away with the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, you can start the engine from outsidethe vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at theend of this section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock allthe doors. The interior lamps will turn off after allof the doors are closed. If enabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC), the parkinglamps will flash once to indicate locking hasoccurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn willalso chirp to indicate locking has occurred.Pressing the lock button may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 111.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

98

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors and theliftgate will unlock. The interior lamps will come onand stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignitionis turned on. If enabled through the DIC, thehazard lamps will flash twice to indicate unlockinghas occurred and if it is dark outside, the highbeams and parking lamps will turn on and stay onfor 20 seconds or until a door is opened. SeeLIGHT FLASH and EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 200 foradditional information.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This buttonmay be used to locate your vehicle. Press andrelease this button to activate the vehicle locatefeature. The horn will chirp three times and theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash three times.Press and hold the button for three seconds tosound the panic alarm. The horn will chirp and theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash for30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel thepanic alarm.

Programmable Horn ChirpThrough the DIC, you may choose whether or notto have a horn chirp when you use the remotekeyless entry transmitter to lock or unlockthe doors. See “LOCK HORN” and “UNLOCKHORN” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 200 for more information.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through your dealer.Remember to bring any remaining transmitters withyou when you go to your dealer in case they needto be re-coded. Each vehicle can have a maximumof four transmitters matched to it.

99

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keylessentry transmitter battery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Use a flat thin object to separate the bottomhalf from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side of thebattery faces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032,or equivalent, type battery.

3. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe cover is on tightly, so water will not get in.

100

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems. SeeClimate Control System on page 170 foradditional information.

Laws in some local communities may restrict theuse of remote starters. For example, somelaws may require a person using remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthe remote vehicle start feature, the remotekeyless entry transmitter will have a button withthis symbol on it.

An increased range of operation is provided withthe remote keyless entry transmitter that hasthe remote vehicle start button. The vehicle canbe started from approximately 197 feet (60 m)away. However, the operating range may be lesswhile the engine is running and you will needto be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than youwere to turn it on.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

To start the engine using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,then immediately press and hold the remotevehicle start button for four seconds or until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’sdoors will be locked.

3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on while theengine is running.

After a remote start, the engine will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.

The maximum number of remote starts betweenignition cycles with the key is two.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

101

After two remote starts have been provided, thevehicle’s ignition switch must be turned toRUN and then back to LOCK using the key, beforethe remote start procedure can be used again.

If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is running, insert the key into theignition switch and turn it to the RUN positionto drive the vehicle.

To manually shut off the engine after a remotestart, do any of the following:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle and press the remote startbutton until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 154.

• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignitionswitch and turn the switch to RUN and thenback to LOCK.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• There is an emission control systemmalfunction. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 188.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided.

102

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.



• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn thekey clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the keycounterclockwise.

You can also use the remote keyless entrytransmitter to lock and unlock the doors.

From the inside, use the manual lock knobs oneach door or the power door lock switch tolock and unlock all doors.

103

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s doornext to the door handle.

Press the top of the switch to unlock the doors.Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actual locking of thedoors and liftgate when the power door lock switchor remote keyless entry transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle,three chimes will sound signaling that the delayedlocking feature is active. Five seconds after thelast door is closed, all of the doors and liftgate willlock. The turn signal lamps will flash to indicatethat the doors have been locked. To cancelthe delay and lock the doors immediately, pressthe lock button a second time.

If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lockthe doors.

If your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you can disable this function. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 200.

Driver’s side shown,Passenger’s side similar

104

Automatic Door LockIf your vehicle has power door locks, the doors willautomatically lock when the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatictransaxle. For a vehicle with a manual transaxle,the speed must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot bedisabled.

Programmable AutomaticDoor UnlockYour vehicle will automatically unlock all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into PARK (P) for avehicle with an automatic transaxle, and whenthe ignition is turned off for a vehicle with a manualtransaxle.

If your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the doors can be programmed toautomatically unlock several ways for vehicles withan automatic transaxle. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 200 for more information.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks whichprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.

To set the security locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the lock below the reardoor security lock label and turn it to thehorizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

105

To open a rear door while the security lock is on,do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, the power door lockswitch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the lock below the reardoor security lock label and turn it to thevertical position.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and the driver’s door will unlock.Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection can be overridden bypressing and holding the power door lock in thelock position for three seconds.

LiftgateTo lock the liftgate from the outside, press the lockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. To unlock the liftgate with the RKE,press the unlock button twice within five seconds.For more information, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 98. Youcan also use the power door lock switch tolock and unlock the liftgate.

Open the liftgate by pressing the touchpad locatedin the handle above the license plate. Onceslightly opened, the liftgate will rise by itself. Lampsin the rear of the vehicle will come on, illuminatingthe rear cargo area, unless the dome lamplever is in the off position. For more information,see Dome Lamp on page 167.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could break the liftgateglass. Always check to make sure the areaabove the liftgate is clear before opening it.

106

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 170.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 132.

Manual Liftgate ReleaseIf the liftgate cannot be opened by pressing theswitch on the outside handle, the battery maybe run down. See Jump Starting on page 320.

To manually open the liftgate, do the following:

1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside ofthe liftgate near the center.

107

2. Locate the releaselever on the latch.

The lever is located about three inches(7.62 cm) behind the trim in the access hole.

3. Insert a tool into the access hole.

Push the release leverrearward.

4. The liftgate will unlatch when the lever ispushed rearward. Push the liftgate to open.

5. Reinstall the trim plug.

108

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

109

Power Windows

The window switches for all doors are located onthe center console. A window switch for eachrear window is located on each rear door.

To open a window, press the bottom of the switch.To close a window, press the top of the switch.

The power windows operate when the ignitionis RUN or ACC (Accessory), or while in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 119.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature that allows the window to be loweredwithout holding the switch. The switch is labeledAUTO. Press the bottom of the switch partway, and the driver’s window will open a smallamount. Press the switch down all the way downand release it and the window will go downautomatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press andrelease the top of the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockoutfeature to prevent rear seat passengers fromoperating the windows. Press the lockout button,located with the power window switches, toturn the feature on and off. When the red band onthe button is showing, the lockout feature is off.

110

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the visor(s).The sun visors can also be detached from thecenter mount and swung out to cover theside windows. They can also be slid along the rodto cover different areas of the front window.

Visor Vanity MirrorsYour vehicle has visor vanity mirrors. Swing downthe sun visor and lift the cover to expose themirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system. If yourvehicle has remotekeyless entry, then ithas contenttheft-deterrent.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system bypressing the remote keyless entry transmitter lockbutton.

The system will arm after either of these thingsoccur:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed,the system will arm immediately. The system willstill arm in 60 seconds if a door is open. Whenthe open door is closed, it will also become armed.

111

The security light will turn on to indicate thatarming has been initiated. Once the system isarmed, the security light will flash once everythree seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, you maylock the car with the manual lock knobs onthe doors.

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button.

• Turn the ignition on.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activatedby either:

• Opening the driver’s door or tailgate. This willcause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followedby a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Opening any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. This will also disarm thesystem.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

112

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press the unlockor lock buttons on the remote keyless transmitter,it means that the content theft security systemalarm was previously activated.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

113

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light comes on, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 381. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 418, for moreinformation.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

114

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe RUN position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the LOCK position.

5. The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Donot make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) onpage 276 or Towing a Trailer (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 277 for the trailer towingcapabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

115

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis all the way in. If it is, turn the steering wheelleft and right while you turn the key hard. Ifnone of this works, then your vehicle needsservice.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

If you have a manual transaxle, the ignition switchcan be turned to LOCK in any shift lever position.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transaxle removingthe key from the ignition switch will lockthe steering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key to ACC.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

116

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns toafter you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in the RUN position whenthe engine is running. But even when the ignitionis not running, you can use RUN to operateyour electrical accessories and to display somewarning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor while in LOCK or ACC, when the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park yourvehicle,a chime will sound, when you open thedriver’s door. Always remember to removeyour key from the ignition and take it with you.This will lock your ignition and transaxle.Also, always remember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

117

Column Lock ReleaseFor vehicles with an automatic transaxle, thefollowing procedure allows the ignition to be turnedto LOCK and ignition key removal in case of adead battery or low voltage battery.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2. Remove the cover from the bottom of thesteering column.

3. Locate the plunger.

4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’sdoor while turning the ignition key to LOCK.Remove the key.

Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer assoon as possible.

118

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which allow’s the radio,power windows, and sunroof to continue to workup to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.

Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition keyis in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned fromRUN to LOCK, the radio will continue to work for10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.Also, the power windows and sunroof will continueto work for up to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

119

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

120

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterIf your vehicle has this feature, in very coldweather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can help. You will get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. For the 2.2L and 2.4L engine, theelectrical cord is located on the passenger’sside of the vehicle near the headlamp and theradiator.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

121

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact a GMdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transaxle OperationIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, theshift lever is located on the console between theseats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe automatic transaxle.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

122

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 128. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer (ManualTransaxle) on page 276 or Towing aTrailer (Automatic Transaxle) on page 277.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply your regular brakes first and then press theshift lever button before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and then move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 130.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 268.

123

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving withthe automatic transaxle. It provides the best fueleconomy for your vehicle. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 253.

124

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speedwithout using your brakes for slight downgradeswhere the vehicle would otherwise accelerate dueto steepness of grade. If constant upshifting ordownshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, thisposition can be used to prevent repetitive types ofshifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I)instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, windingroads and when towing a trailer, so that there is lessshifting between gears.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actuallyusing your brakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift intoLOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Transaxle Operation

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manual transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into FIRST (1).

125

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) thesame way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let upon the clutch pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others.Do not shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

126

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

{CAUTION:

If the front passenger seat back is foldeddown, the armrest may make it awkwardto grab and pull up the parking brakelever. If the lever is not pulled up farenough, your vehicle may roll and you orothers could be injured. Move your handlower on the lever or raise the seat backso that you can set the brake.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 185.

127

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chimewill sound and a warning message will bedisplayed when the parking brake is applied andthe vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 kph).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 197.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer (ManualTransaxle) on page 276 or Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle) on page 277.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

128

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever into

PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 128.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

129

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lock release isdesigned to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out ofPARK (P) unless the ignition is in a positionother than LOCK.

The shift lock release is always functional exceptin the case of a an uncharged or low voltage(less than 9 volt) battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or abattery with low voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See Jump Starting onpage 320 for more information.

To shift out of PARK (P) use the followingsequence:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking Your VehicleBefore leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutchpedal in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R),and firmly apply the parking brake. Once theshift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R) withthe clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn theignition key to LOCK, remove the key and releasethe clutch. See Manual Transaxle Operation onpage 125.

130

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

131

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

132

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 132.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 264.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 128.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer (ManualTransaxle) on page 276 or Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle) on page 277.

133

MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorTo reduce glare from lamps behind you, move thelever toward you to the night position. Yourvehicle may also have reading lamps. Press thebuttons, located under the mirror, up to turnthe lamps on or off.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with OnStar®, compass andreading lamps. This feature enables the mirror tosense nighttime glare from vehicle headlampsfrom behind and automatically dim to reduce theglare to a safe level.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. Press and hold the on/offbutton once and the green indicator light located tothe left of the button will go out indicating the

feature is off. To turn the feature back on, pressand hold the on/off button and the green indicatorlight will come on.

The reading lamps, located under the mirror, canbe turned on or off by pushing the buttons up.There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®

system. See your dealer for more information onthe system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. SeeOnStar® in the Index for more information.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.When the ignition and the compass feature are on,the compass will show two character boxes for afew seconds. After a few seconds, the mirror willdisplay the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the word CAL appearsin the compass window, the compass mayneed to be reset or calibrated.

134

To calibrate the compass, do the following:

1. Make sure CAL is displayed. If CAL is notdisplayed, press and hold the on/off buttonuntil CAL is displayed.

2. While CAL is displayed, drive the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustthe compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appear on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If CAL appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

135

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and reading lamps.This feature enables the mirror to sense nighttimeglare from vehicle headlamps from behind andautomatically dim to reduce the glare to asafe level.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. Press the on/off buttononce and the green indicator light located to theleft of the button will go out indicating the feature isoff. To turn the feature back on, press andrelease the on/off button and the green indicatorlight will come on.

The reading lamps, located under the mirror, canbe turned on or off by pushing the buttons up.

Compass OperationY: This is the on/off button for thecompass feature.

Press the compass button once to turn thecompass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the word CAL appearsin the compass window, the compass mayneed to be reset or calibrated.

136

To calibrate the compass, do the following:

1. Make sure CAL is displayed. If CAL is notdisplayed, press and hold the on/off buttonuntil CAL is displayed.

2. While CAL is displayed drive the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustthe compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the compass button until a Zand a zone number appear on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the compass button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If CAL appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

137

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Press the left or right side of the selector switchlocated beneath the control pad to choose the leftor right mirror. Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjusting either outsidemirror.To adjust the mirror, press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move the mirrorin the direction you want it to go. Adjust eachoutside mirror so that you can see a little of yourvehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.Adjust each mirror so a little of the side of thevehicle can be seen while sitting in a comfortabledriving position. These mirrors are designed tobreak away when necessary.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingsappear farther away than they really are.

138

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

139

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

140

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 234 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

141

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

142

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up on the lever.Close the glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders located in the floorconsole between the front seats. There is also acupholder for the rear seat passenger locatedat the rear of the floor console. They can beremoved for cleaning.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaYour vehicle has a storage compartment on theinstrument panel above the air vents. Pushthe button on the compartment to open the lid.

Floor Console Storage AreaThere are two small storage compartments on thefloor console, one at the front under the windowswitches and one next to the parking brakelever. The rubber liners can be removed forcleaning.

Rear Storage AreaYour vehicle may have two rear storage areas thatcan be used for the convenience net or othersmall items.

143

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/CoverYour vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargocover feature. The panel/cargo cover can beadjusted into four positions.

To use the panel in the first position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thelower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock itin place.

The panel can be used in this position if you needadditional space above the panel. Place thecargo on top of the panel in this position.

{CAUTION:

If you were to carry things on theadjustable panel when it is in the upper(cargo cover) or center positions, during asudden vehicle movement or a crash,those things could be thrown around inthe vehicle. You or others could beinjured. When it is in the upper or centerposition, always secure any cargo on thefloor beneath the panel/cover.

144

To use the panel in the second position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thetop guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock itin place.

This can be used as a cargo cover for the reararea. It has hooks underneath for shopping bags.

The third position is with the front corners placedin the lower guides and the rear corners placedin the upper guides. Do not load cargo onthe panel in this position. The fourth position iswith the front corners placed in the lower guidesclosest to the rear seat for subfloor access. Do notdrive while the panel is in this position.

Your vehicle may have a cargo mat that coversthe panel/cargo cover.

145

Roof Rack SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a roof racksystem.

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along.Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off, andthis could cause you or other drivers tohave a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, never carrysomething longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangsover the rear sides of the vehicle may damageyour vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on theslats as far forward as possible and against theside rails making sure to fasten it securely.

Notice: Loading cargo directly on the roof ofthe vehicle may cause damage to the vehicleand would not be covered under warranty.Do not place cargo on the roof the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 269.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check frequently to ensure your cargois securely fastened.

The roof rack system has siderails that areattached to the roof. All cargo must be loaded onthe luggage carrier crossrails only.

Use GM accessory racks that are compatible withyour roof rack system, these are available atyour GM dealer.

146

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the cargo area. There aresix metal rings in the cargo area that the net canbe attached to. Two are on the floor behindthe rear seat, two are on the floor near the liftgateand the last two are near the liftgate glass. Thenet can be positioned on the liftgate usingtwo rings securing the cargo in a envelope orusing four rings, keeping the cargo from fallingover during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.The net can also be positioned using the fourrings on the floor, with cargo underneath. The netis not for larger, heavier loads.

SunroofThe vehicle may have a power sunroof.

The switches thatoperate the sunroofare located in theheadliner.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must bein RUN, in ACC, or Retained Accessory Power(RAP) must be active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 119.

147

Express Open: The express open feature willoperate from the closed or partially open position.To express open the power sunroof, fully pressthe driver’s side switch rearward once. To stop thesunroof glass in a desired position other than tothe express-open position, press the switch again,in either direction, to stop the movement. If thesunshade is in the closed position, it will open withthe sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to thevent position from the closed position, press andhold the passenger’s side sunroof switch forward.The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward tothe full vent position. The sunshade must beopened manually.

Express Close: The express close feature willoperate from the open or partially open position.To express close the power sunroof, fully press thedriver’s side switch forward once. To stop thesunroof glass in a desired position otherthan closed, press the switch again in eitherdirection. The sunshade must be closed manually.

Close: To close the power sunroof, operate thecontrols according to one of the following:

• From the open position, press and hold thedriver’s side sunroof switch forward. Thesunshade must be closed manually.

• From the vent position, press and hold thepassenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.

Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch featurewill detect the object and stop the sunrooffrom closing at the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof will then return to the full-open orvent position. To close the sunroof once it hasre-opened, refer to the two options previouslydescribed under the “Close” feature instructions.

148

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 152Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 154Other Warning Devices ............................. 154Horn .......................................................... 154Tilt Wheel .................................................. 155Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 155Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 156Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 156Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 156Windshield Wipers ..................................... 157Windshield Washer .................................... 158Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 159Cruise Control ........................................... 160Headlamps ................................................ 163Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 164Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 164Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 164Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 165Fog Lamps ................................................ 166Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 166Dome Lamp .............................................. 167

Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 167Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 168Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 168Electric Power Management ...................... 168Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 168Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 169Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 170

Climate Controls ......................................... 170Climate Control System ............................. 170Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 174Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 175

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 177Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 178Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 179Tachometer ............................................... 179Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 180Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 180Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 181Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 182Charging System Light .............................. 184

Section 3 Instrument Panel

149

Brake System Warning Light ..................... 185Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ........ 186Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .... 187Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 187Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 188Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 188Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 192Security Light ............................................ 193Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 193Highbeam On Light ................................... 193Fuel Gage ................................................. 193

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 194DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 195DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 197DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 200

Audio System(s) ......................................... 206Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 207Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 208Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 210Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 215Using an MP3 ........................................... 226XM Radio Messages ................................. 232Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 233Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 234Radio Reception ........................................ 234Care of Your CDs ..................................... 235Care of the CD Player .............................. 235Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 236XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 236

Section 3 Instrument Panel

150

✍ NOTES

151

Instrument Panel Overview

152

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 174.

B. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped). SeeCruise Control on page 160.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 155.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 178.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 157 and WindshieldWasher on page 158.

F. Storage Bin. See Instrument Panel StorageArea on page 143.

G. Fog Lamps Button (If Equipped). See FogLamps on page 166.

H. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 297.

I. Driver Information Center (DIC) Steering WheelControls. See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 194.

J. Horn. See Horn on page 154.

K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 234.

L. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 166.

M. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 206.

N. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 170.

O. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Controls RearWindow Wiper/Washer on page 159.

P. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See ManualTransaxle Operation on page 125 andAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 122.

Q. Accessory Power Outlet (If Equipped). CigaretteLighter (If Equipped). See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 169 and Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 170.

R. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 182.

S. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 154.

T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 143.

153

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbols on thecenter pad of the steering wheel.

154

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Then, movethe wheel to a comfortable position and raisethe lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 156.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 156.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 156.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 163.

155

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out andother drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal aturn, check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 381.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

156

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If the wiper blades arefrozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If the blades do become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 335.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload. If the wipers gets stuck, turn thewipers off, clear away the snow or ice, and thenturn the wipers back on.

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at high speed.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at low speed.

& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to seta delay between wipes.

157

6 (Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive): Whenthe lever is in the delay position, move theintermittent adjust band to set for shorter or longerdelay cycles. To the left of the adjust band arebars that indicate the frequency of the wipes.Smaller bars mean the wiper movement is lessfrequent. Larger bars mean the wiper movement ismore frequent.

During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycletime is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehiclespeed increases your delay cycle time will decreaseand wiper movement will occur more frequently.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tomist and release for a single wiping cycle.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe andthe lever will return to its original position. Ifadditional wipes are needed, hold the band onmist longer.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are onfor more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampswill turn on automatically. They will turn off15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers willstop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for aboutthree times or will resume the speed you wereusing before.

158

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear windowwasher/wiper button islocated on theinstrument panel belowthe climate controls.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

5 (Delay): Press this side of the button to turnon the intermittent wiping setting that has a longerdelay.

Y (Washer Fluid): Press this button to washand wipe the window.

The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear windows, check thefluid level.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button toturn on an intermittent setting that has a shorterdelay.

To turn either of the intermittent wiper settings off,press the opposite side of the button to turn itto the off position. Pressing the button all the waydown on either side will activate an intermittentwiper setting.

159

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

160

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off. The indicator light on thebutton will be on when the cruise control is on andgo off when the cruise control is turned off.

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET− control button and release it.The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) toshow the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When you apply the brakes or clutch, the cruisecontrol will shut off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 246. When road conditions allow, thecruise control can be used again.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. To return toyour previously set speed, you do not need togo through the set process again. Once you aregoing about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan press the RES+ part of the button briefly.

This will take you back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

161

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

1. Disengage the cruise control by applying thebrake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerateto a higher speed and reset the cruise control.

2. If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ button. Hold it thereuntil reach the desired speed, and thenrelease the button. To increase your speed invery small amounts, press the RES+ buttonbriefly and then release it. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET− button until youreach the lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET− button briefly. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the cruise control speed you setearlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the accelerator pedal tomaintain your speed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keepthe vehicle speed down. Of course, applying thebrake turns off the cruise control. Many drivers findthis to be too much trouble and don’t use cruisecontrol on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal or the clutch if your vehicle has a manualtransaxle.

Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch will only endthe current cruise control session. Press thecruise control on/off button to turn the systemcompletely off.

162

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Thisposition automatically turns on the DaytimeRunning Lamps during daytime, and theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is the momentaryOff/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System.In Canada, this only works when the vehicleswith an automatic transaxle are in PARK (P) andvehicles with a manual transaxle have theparking brake set and the vehicle is not moving.

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of theswitch to off/on will turn off the AutomaticHeadlamp System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFFmessage will display on the driver informationcenter and a chime will sound. Rotating the switchto off/on again will turn the Automatic HeadlampSystem back on. An AUTO LIGHTS ON messagewill display on the driver information center.The Automatic Headlamp System is always turnedon at the beginning of an ignition cycle forvehicles with manual transaxle.

163

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers are turnedon. For this feature to work, automatic lightingmust be enabled. See Headlamps on page 163 foradditional information.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off. They willalso turn off 15 seconds after the windshield wipercontrol is turned off.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not covered orthe headlamps will come on when you do notneed them.

The DRL system will make the headlamps comeon at reduced brightness when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights willnot be illuminated.

The DRL system will be off any time your vehicleis in PARK (P). The DRL system on U.S.vehicles can also be turned off by using the off/onswitch for one ignition cycle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

164

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your automaticsystem will turn on your headlamps at the normalbrightness along with other lamps such as thetaillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, instrumentpanel lights, and interior switch backlighting.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, orthe headlamps may remain on when you donot need them.

The system may also be on when driving througha parking garage, heavy overcast weather or atunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the automaticlamp control system so that driving underbridges or bright overhead street lights does notaffect the system. The automatic lamp controlsystem will only be affected when the light sensorsees a change in lighting lasting longer thanthis delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic lamp system will come on immediately.Once you leave the garage, it will take about20 seconds for the automatic lamp systemto change to DRL if it is light outside. During thatdelay, the instrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full bright position.See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 166.

To idle your vehicle with the system off, turnthe ignition on and turn the exterior light switch tothe off/on position. For Canadian vehicles, thetransaxle must stay in PARK (P) for this functionor the parking brake must be set for vehicleswith manual transaxles.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamps when you need them.

165

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle isequipped with a foglamp button, it is locatedto the right of thesteering wheel andabove the radio.

The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light on the cluster will come on when thefog lamps are on. Push the button again to turnthe fog lamps off.

The parking lamps will automatically turn on andoff when the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located to theright of the steeringwheel and abovethe radio.

Move the thumbwheel to the left to dim the lightsor to the right to brighten the lights.

The dome lamps will turn on when the thumbwheelis moved completely to the right.

166

Dome Lamp

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp off, even when a door is opened.

1 (Door): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp on whenever a door is opened.

The dome lamp and mirror reading lamps will turnon if the lever is in the door position and theinstrument panel brightness control is turned tothe brightest setting. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 166.

+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turnon the dome lamp.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside your vehicle will go on when youopen any door. These lamps will fade out afterabout 20 seconds after all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turned to ON.These lamps will also go on when you press theunlock symbol button or the horn symbol onthe keyless entry system transmitter.

The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on forabout 20 seconds after your key is removed fromthe ignition to provide an illuminated exit.

167

Mirror Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps on therearview mirror. Push the button to turn the readinglamps on and off. The reading lamps willautomatically come on when a door is open.

Rear Reading LampsPush the lens to turn the reading lamps onand off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed to generatemore power, whenever needed.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignitionis turned off, the battery rundown protectionsystem will automatically turn the lamp off after20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.

168

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectelectrical equipment such as a cellular phoneor CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located on theinstrument panel below the climate controls and atthe rear of the center console.

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When notin use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If youexperience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on the accessory poweroutlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

169

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter. To use the lighter, located on theinstrument panel below the climate controls, pushit in all the way and let go. When it is ready, itwill pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

To clean the center console ashtray, remove theentire ashtray and empty it.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has remote start and you want towarm up or cool down the interior before youget in, leave your climate control system on withthe settings adjusted where you want them.The next time the vehicle is started with remotestart, the climate control system will come on andadjust the interior to the temperature settings.

170

OperationTo change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets, andthen directs the remaining air to the floor outlets.Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side windows.The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.Recirculation mode is not allowed in this mode.

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thefan speed. In any setting other than off, the fan willrun continuously with the ignition on. The fanmust be turned on to run the air conditioning (AC)compressor.

9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all theway counterclockwise to the off position.

Temperature Control: Turn the left knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

171

@ (Recirculate): Press this button to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle orto help heat or cool the air inside your vehiclemore quickly. An indicator light above the symbolwill come on in this mode. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on. This mode is notavailable for floor, defog and defrost modes. Whenthe recirculation button is pressed, the recirculationindicator light will flash five times and outsideair will be delivered. Operation in this mode duringperiods of high humidity and cool outsidetemperatures may result in increased windowfogging. If window fogging is experienced, selectthe defrost mode.

; (Outside Air): Press this button to allowoutside air to circulate through your vehicle.An indicator light above the symbol will come onin this mode.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. Whenthis button is pressed, an indicator light below thesymbol will come on to let you know the airconditioning is activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select air conditioning.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn off the recirculation by pressing the outsideair button.

172

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

The air conditioning compressor cannot be turnedon when the fan is off.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield and side windows. Use the defog modeto clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. For best results, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield before defrosting.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs approximately halfof the air to the windshield and the side windowoutlets and half to the floor outlets. When youselect this mode the system runs the airconditioning compressor. To defog the windowsfaster, turn the temperature control knob clockwiseto the warmest setting.

Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of theair to the windshield, with some air directed to theside window outlets and the floor outlets. Whenyou select this mode the system runs the airconditioning compressor. To defrost the windowsfaster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.

173

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear window as possible.An indicator light below the symbol will comeon to let you know that the rear window defoggeris activated.

The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, the defogger will onlyrun for approximately seven minutes beforeturning off. If turned on again, the defogger willonly run for approximately seven minutes beforeturning off. If vehicle speed is greater than 50 mph(80 km/h) and the rear defogger is active, it willremain on as long as the speed is greaterthan 50 mph (80 km/h). The defogger can also beturned off by pressing the button again or byturning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentRotate the outlets and move the outlet vanes tochange the direction of the airflow and to open andclose the outlets.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

174

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside airand recirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment filter. The filter removes certainparticles from the air, including pollen and dustparticles. Reductions in airflow, which mayoccur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate thatthe filter needs to be replaced early.

The filter should be replaced as part of routinescheduled maintenance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 393 for replacementintervals. See your dealer for details on changingthe filter. To find out what type of filter to use,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 405.

To access the passenger compartment air filteryou must go through the glove box.

1. Open the glove box and remove all articlesfrom the inside.

2. Release the glove box stops by pushing themboth outward to let the glove box drop opencompletely.

175

3. Pull each of the three tabs of the filter accessdoor down and open the access doordownward.

4. Pull the filter out, keeping it face up so as notto drop any dust into the passengercompartment upon removal.

When installing a new air filter make sure theAIR FLOW arrow is pointing downward. ReverseSteps 1 through 4 making sure the glove boxdoor is back into place.

176

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

177

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you willneed to drive safely and economically.

United States Cluster shown, Canada similar

178

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 195.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply open the driver’s doorand the mileage will be displayed briefly.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometer displaysthe engine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the red warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe red warning area.

179

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither thechime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

180

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 71.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN orSTART. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

181

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


182


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

183

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 82 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 181.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you it isworking.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

184

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brake

does not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you have abrake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure theparking brake is fully released. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or, the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 274.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


185

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine is startedand may stay on for several seconds. That isnormal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the lightcomes on when you are driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on after driving at a speed of at least13 mph (20 km/h), or comes on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, youdo not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 185.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

186

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle isequipped with theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS),this warning light shouldcome on briefly asyou start the engine.

If the warning light does not come on, then have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the warning light stays on, or comes on whenyou are driving, there may be a problem with yourEnhanced Traction System and your vehiclemay need service. When this warning light is on,the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 246 for more information.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 309 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 309. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

187

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Your vehicle has anengine coolanttemperature gage. Withthe ignition turned toRUN, this gage showsthe engine coolanttemperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, yourengine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 309.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

188

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 289.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

189

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 294.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

190

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 291. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

191

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light will go outwhen you turn the ignition to START. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on,you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

192

Security Light

For more information onthis light seeTheft-Deterrent Systemson page 111.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 166 for moreinformation.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left.

193

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 386.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).The DIC display gives you the status of many ofyour vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used todisplay driver personalization menu modes andwarning/status messages. All messages will appearin the DIC display, located at the bottom of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left sideof the steering wheel.

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

194

r (Reset): Press this button to reset somevehicle information mode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting, oracknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttonsat the same time for one second, then releasethe buttons to enter the personalization menu. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 200 formore information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. TheDIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

Information Modes

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature and OdometerPress the information button until the outsideair temperature and the odometer are displayed.This mode shows the temperature outside ofthe vehicle in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C) and the total distancethe vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). The outside air temperaturewill appear on the left side of the DIC display andthe odometer will appear on the right side ofthe display.

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 200.

195

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A orTRIP B is displayed. These modes show thecurrent distance traveled since the last reset foreach trip odometer in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Both odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGE isdisplayed. This mode shows the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based onfuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW willdisplay.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. The FUEL RANGE modecannot be reset.

ECON (Economy)Press the information button until ECON isdisplayed. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based oncurrent and past driving conditions.

Press and hold the reset button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continually updatedeach time you drive.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED isdisplayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

196

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE isdisplayed. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after anoil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Engine Oil on page 299 andScheduled Maintenance on page 393.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil Life System onpage 302.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT isdisplayed. This mode shows the temperature of theengine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C).

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when the vehicle’s conditionis no longer present. To acknowledge a messageand clear it from the display, press and holdany of the DIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning message will come back onthe next time the vehicle is turned off and backon. With most messages, a warning chime soundswhen the message displays. Your vehicle mayhave other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 165 formore information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 165 formore information.

197

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.The brake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 185 for more information.Have the brake system serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, youstill must reset the engine oil life systemseparately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 302 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 393 for more information.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to makesure that it is on properly. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turnthe message off.

COOLING MODE ONThis message may display on some vehicles.Under severe conditions, hot ambienttemperatures, steep grades, and towing, yourvehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.This is temporary and normal under theseconditions. This does not require engine ortransaxle service.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise controlsystem is active. See Cruise Control on page 160for more information.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of thevehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When thismessage displays, make sure that the door(s)are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

198

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCEDThis message displays to inform you thatthe vehicle has reduced engine power to avoiddamaging the engine. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

GATE AJARThis message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgate isclosed completely. See Liftgate on page 106for more information.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace thebattery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 98.

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 193, Fuel on page 291,and Filling the Tank on page 294 for moreinformation.

LOW TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this message displays when thesystem is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this message displays,so adjust your driving accordingly. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 246 for moreinformation.

199

PARKING BRAKEThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 127 formore information.

POWER STEERINGThis message displays if a problem has beendetected with the electric power steering. Haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to apreferred setting. All of the features listed may notbe available on your vehicle. Only the featuresavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use the followingprocedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is

stopped.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press and hold the information and resetbuttons at the same time for one second, thenrelease to enter the personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will beaccessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll throughthe available settings for each mode.If you do not make a selection within tenseconds, the display will go back to theprevious information displayed.

200

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset theengine oil life system. To reset the system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 302. See“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 195 for more information.

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display thevehicle information. When UNITS appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): Allinformation will be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information willbe displayed in metric units.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allowsremote start to be turned OFF or ON. Remotestart allows you to start the engine from outside ofthe vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. When REMOTE STARTappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.

See “Remote Vehicle Start” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 98for more information.


201

LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the firstpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The horn will still chirp on the second press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 98 for more information.


UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp on the first press of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when theunlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press ofthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter.



202

LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time thelock or unlock button on the RKE transmitteris pressed, can be enabled or disabled. WhenLIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock or unlock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signallighting will flash when the lock or unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed.



DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking of thevehicle, can be enabled or disabled. WhenDELAY LOCK appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power lock switch or the lock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter asecond time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately whenpressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 104, DelayedLocking on page 104, and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 98 formore information.


203

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors, can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automaticallyunlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automaticallyunlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the door(s)will automatically unlock when the key is turned off.

If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you canselect when the automatic unlocking will occur. See“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)”following.

See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 105 for more information.


UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)This screen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL isselected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic door unlockingwill occur. When UNLK appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 105 for more information.


204

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTSappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turnon when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting willturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC will display. When LANGUAGEappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display allinformation in English.

FRENCH: The DIC will display all informationin French.

SPANISH: The DIC will display all informationin Spanish.

GERMAN: The DIC will display all informationin German.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and exit outof the personalization menu mode.

205

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when anyof the following conditions occur:

• A ten second time period has elapsed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu list isreached.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 238. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 238.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

206

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 119 for more information.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numbered onethrough six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) orRUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

4. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stopafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

207

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

208

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radio ison. The date with display times out after a fewseconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

209

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

210

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or theBASS/TREBLE pushbutton until the desired tonecontrol label displays. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. The current bass or treblelevel displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, orhas static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjustBASS and TREBLE Settings.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealer forservice.

Loc (Locked): This message is displayed whilethe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

211

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 235 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

212

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toresume playing the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to CD tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from theCD you are listening to in random order.The random icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off random play.The random icon disappears from the display.

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackcan be repeated.

To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. An arrow symboldisplays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

4 (Information): Press this button to switchthe display between the track number, elapsedtime of the track, and the time. When the ignition isoff, press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

213

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 238 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the car speakers.

214

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD(MP3) similar

215

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersappears on the display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as yourspeed changes while driving. That way, the volumelevel should sound about the same as youdrive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM(automatic volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low,Med (medium), or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation. The displaytimes out after approximately 10 seconds.Each higher setting allows for more radiovolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

216

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes on to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can display. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 238.

217

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1 through 6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

218

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted bypressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward) orREV (reverse) button until the desired levels areobtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, orhas static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance orfade, press the tune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting can beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

219

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not let you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

220

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 232 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. You will hear a beep andLoad All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

221

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.






Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

222

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toresume playing the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to the tracks in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs ina six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button. Abeep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slotof the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

223


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 226later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

224

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 238 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle’s speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues to play, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system begins toplay audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays.

225

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3 files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressed audioformat.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

226

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, ora combination of a large number of filesand folders, or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, and might not fully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

227

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software, can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

228

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.






Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beep willsound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

229

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

230

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listento MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. The album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album and begins to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and amessage showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

231

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

232

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredCAT Not Found No channel available for

the chosen categoryThere are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

233

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Radio controls arelocated on the right sideof the steering wheel.If your vehicle hasthis feature, some audiocontrols can beadjusted at this location.They include thefollowing:

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous stored radio station andstay there. Press and hold the up or down arrowlonger than three-quarters of a second to advanceto the next or previous station with a strongsignal in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track. Pressand hold the up or down arrow longer thanthree-quarters of a second to continue advancingahead or reversing back, to other tracks withinthe disc.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this button again to turnthe sound on. If your vehicle is equipped withOnStar®, press and hold this button for two secondsto activate voice on the OnStar system. See theOnStar® System on page 139 in this manual formore information.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

234

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of XMsignal for a period of time. The radio may displayNO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

235

Fixed Mast AntennaThis type of antenna is called a fixed mastantenna. It is mounted at the center of the roof,just behind the windshield.

The mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the roof. If tightening is required,tighten by hand.

If you are putting a protective cover over thevehicle, remove the mast by hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located atthe rear of the vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

If your vehicle has a roof rack, loading items ontothe roof of your vehicle can interfere with theperformance of the XM™ system. Make sure theXM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.

236

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 238Defensive Driving ...................................... 238Drunken Driving ........................................ 239Control of a Vehicle .................................. 242Braking ...................................................... 242Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 243Braking in Emergencies ............................. 245Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 246Steering .................................................... 248Off-Road Recovery .................................... 251Passing ..................................................... 251Loss of Control .......................................... 253Driving at Night ......................................... 254Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 256City Driving ............................................... 258

Freeway Driving ........................................ 259Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 260Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 261Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 262Winter Driving ........................................... 264If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 268Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 269Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 269

Towing ........................................................ 274Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 274Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 274Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) ......... 276Towing a Trailer

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 277

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

237

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

238

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

239

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

240

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

241

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 246.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 289.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 185.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

242

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops. Thebrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test is going on, and you may evennotice that your brake pedal moves or pulses alittle. This is normal.

243

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to makethe most of available tire and road conditions. Thiscan help you steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

244

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 243.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

245

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the systemreduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transaxle to limit wheel spin. You may feel orhear the system working, but this is normal.

A LOW TRACTION message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) when the tractioncontrol system is actively limiting wheel spin.Slippery road conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theEnhanced Traction System begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, you may re-engage the cruisecontrol. See Cruise Control on page 160.

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on to let you knowthere’s a problem.

The Enhanced Traction System warning light maycome on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by moving the shiftlever to LOW (L), the warning light will come onand stay on. To turn the system back on, movethe shift lever back to a position other thanLOW (L). The warning light should go off.

• The warning light will come on when you setyour parking brake with the engine running, andit will stay on if your parking brake does notrelease fully. If the transaxle shift lever is in anyposition other than LOW (L)and the warninglight stays on after your parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a problem with thesystem.

• If the traction control system is affected by anengine related problem, the system will turn offand the warning light will come on.

246

If the warning light stays on, or comes on whenyou’re driving, there may be a problem withyour Enhanced Traction System and your vehiclemay need service. When this warning light ison, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

If the Enhanced Traction System warning lightcomes on and stays on for an extended period oftime when the transaxle shift lever is in anyposition other than LOW (L), your vehicle needsservice.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the EnhancedTraction System on. But you can turn the systemoff if you prefer.

To turn the system off, shift to LOW (L) orREVERSE (R).

When you turn the system off, the EnhancedTraction System warning light will come on and stayon when the gear shift is in LOW (L). The warninglight will not come on when the gear shift is inREVERSE (R). If the Enhanced Traction System islimiting wheel spin when you shift to LOW (L) orREVERSE (R) to turn the system off, the warninglight will come on in LOW (L). But the system won’tturn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longera current need to limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time byshifting to AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) orINTERMEDIATE (I). The Enhanced TractionSystem warning light should go off.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 289 for more information.

247

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, thepower steering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems and/or the POWERSTEERING message comes on, contactyour dealer for service repairs. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 197.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

248

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Enhanced Traction System(ETS) on page 246.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


249

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 242. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

250

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

251

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

252

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),remember: It helps to avoid only the accelerationskid. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 246. If you do not have the EnhancedTraction System, or if the system is off, thenan acceleration skid is also best handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

253

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

254

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

255

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif the windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep the windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep the windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace thewindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect the brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

256

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under the tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fast enough. Whenyour vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifthe tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough the engine’s air intake and badlydamage the engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

257

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 336.

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

258

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 259.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

259

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion. Afterdriving for any distance at higher speeds, you maytend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

260

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

261

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

262

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

263

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 336.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

264

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS), it will improve your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though yourvehicle has this system, you will want to slowdown and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the ETS off, such as when drivingthrough deep snow and loose gravel, to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 246.

If your vehicle does not have ETS, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spinand polish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If your vehicle does have ABS, seeAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 243. ABSimproves your vehicle’s stability when youmake a hard stop on a slippery road. Whetheryour vehicle has ABS or not, you will want to beginstopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin toslide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brakepedal down steadily to get the most tractionyou can.

265

Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if youbrake so hard that your wheels stop rolling,you will just slide. Brake so the wheels alwayskeep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allowgreater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

266

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

267

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS), the ETS can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 246. If the stuck condition is too severefor the ETS to free the vehicle, turn the ETS offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 269.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 353.

268

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels. Ifyour vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS), turn the ETS off. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 246. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reverse directions, you willcause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.If that does not get your vehicle out after a fewtries, it may need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 274.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry, theTire and Loading Information label and theVehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

269

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post(striker). The tire and loading information label liststhe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weightincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 336 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 344.

There is also important loading information on theCertification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in thissection.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

270

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 276 or Towinga Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) on page 277 forimportant information on towing a trailer, towingsafety rules, and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

271



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

272

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is foundon the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the size of your original tires andthe inflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station and weighyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Besure to spread out your load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and it canchange the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

273

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 418.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

274

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 260.

Dinghy TowingYou may dinghy tow your vehicle from the frontfollowing these steps:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock thesteering wheel.

3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Release the parking brake.

275

To prevent the battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the following fusefrom the floor console fuse block: 8 (IgnitionSwitch, PASS-Key® III+). See Floor Console FuseBlock on page 381 for more information.

Remember to reinstall the fuse once you havereached your destination.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly TowingYour vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can bedinghy towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in thissection.

Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may causedamage because of reduced groundclearance. Always tow your vehicle using thedinghy towing procedure listed in thissection or put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equippedwith a manual transaxle.

276

Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withan automatic transaxle and the proper trailertowing equipment. If your vehicle is not equippedas stated above, do not tow a trailer. To identify

the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, cooling, durability and fueleconomy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer addsconsiderably to wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

277

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow when the outside air temperatureis above 100°F (38°C).

• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)per year.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires

278

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at ourCustomer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 416 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengers,or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 269 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

279

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. Ithas a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWRof 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the

280

total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equippedwith some of the latest options and you have afront seat passenger and two rear seat passengerswith some luggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to thefront axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rearaxle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effect onthe rear axle.

Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on therear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The effect oftongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you withbeing able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongueweight. Since tongue weight is usually at least10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, you canexpect that the largest trailer your vehicle canproperly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You will find these numbers onthe Tire-Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 269. Then be sure you do notgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

281

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that doesnot attach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you donot seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 132. Dirtand water can also enter the vehicle.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you will be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly. Do not try to tap into yourvehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

282

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becausethe vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need togo much farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

283

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers youare about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It is important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steep continuousgrades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine and transaxletemperatures may result and damage yourvehicle. Frequent stops are very important toallow the engine and transaxle to cool.

When towing under severe conditions such as hotambient temperatures or steep grades, yourvehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.A COOLING MODE ON message may also appearin the DIC.This alerts the driver that the shiftingmode is in progress and is aiding engine cooling.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 197DIC Warnings and Messages for more information.

284

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If theindicator is in the red area, turn off the airconditioning to reduce engine load. See EngineOverheating on page 309.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, hereis how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or intogear for a manual transaxle. When parkinguphill, turn your wheels away from thecurb. When parking downhill, turn your wheelsinto the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) foran automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for amanual transaxle.

5. Release the regular brakes.

285

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 393 for more on this.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid(do not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, coolingsystem and brake system.

Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If youare trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 309.

286

Service ........................................................ 289Accessories and Modifications ................... 289California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 290Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 290Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 291Fuel ............................................................. 291

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 291Gasoline Specifications .............................. 292California Fuel ........................................... 292Additives ................................................... 292Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 293Filling the Tank ......................................... 294Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 296

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 296Hood Release ........................................... 297Engine Compartment Overview .................. 298Engine Oil ................................................. 299Engine Oil Life System .............................. 302Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 304Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 305Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 305Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 306Engine Coolant .......................................... 306

Pressure Cap ............................................ 309Engine Overheating ................................... 309Cooling System ......................................... 312Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 316Brakes ...................................................... 317Battery ...................................................... 320Jump Starting ............................................ 320

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 327Bulb Replacement ....................................... 330

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 330Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ....................................... 330Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ... 331Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 332License Plate Lamp ................................... 334Replacement Bulbs ................................... 334

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 335Tires ............................................................ 336

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 337Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 340Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 344Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 345

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

287

When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 347Buying New Tires ...................................... 347Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 349Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 350Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 351Wheel Replacement .................................. 352Tire Chains ............................................... 353If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 354Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 355Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 356Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 359Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 365Compact Spare Tire .................................. 369

Appearance Care ........................................ 370Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 370Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 371Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 372Care of Safety Belts .................................. 373Weatherstrips ............................................ 373Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 373Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 374

Finish Care ............................................... 374Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 375Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 375Tires ......................................................... 376Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 376Finish Damage .......................................... 377Underbody Maintenance ............................ 377Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 377Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 378

Vehicle Identification .................................. 379Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 379Service Parts Identification Label ............... 379

Electrical System ........................................ 380Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 380Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 380Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 380Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 380Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 381Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 381Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 383

Capacities and Specifications .................... 386

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

288

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

289

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 430.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 88.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 407.

290

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 379.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine(VIN Code D), use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If theoctane rating is less than 87, you may notice anaudible knocking noise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code P), use premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. Youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmay notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

291

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 292 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 188. Ifthis occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs maynot be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

292

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

293

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

294

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 373.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 188.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 197 for moreinformation.

To close the fuel door securely, push the door tothe closed position.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 188.

295

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

296

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following.

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is located to theleft of the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

2. Then go to the frontof the vehicle andpush the secondaryhood releaselever to the left. It islocated under thefront center ofthe grille.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gasstruts will automatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully open position.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Lower the hood until thelifting force of the struts is reduced, thenrelease the hood to latch fully. Check to makesure the hood is closed and repeat theprocess if necessary.

297

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L engine (2.2L engine similar), here is what you will see:

298

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 316.

B. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 309.C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking

Coolant” under Engine Coolant on page 306.D. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 304.E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).

See Cooling System Cooling System onpage 312.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 299.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 299.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakeson page 317 and Hydraulic Clutch onpage 306.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 320.

J. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 383.

K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 320.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

299

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, youwill need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 386.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 298 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

300

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for anduse only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

301

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messagein the Driver Information Center (DIC) willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 197. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However,your engine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

302

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, the system must bereset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttonson the DIC at the same time to enter thepersonalization menu. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 200.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modesuntil the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DICdisplay shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This willtell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the resetprocedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

303

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 393 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

Because this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Disconnect the MAF sensor, PCV hose,and both ducts.

2. Pull the entire system from the top of theengine.

3. Flip the system over and place it on a soft,non-abrasive surface.

4. Remove the screws that hod the housing andcover together and lift off the housing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system.Be sure to reinstall the housing tightly.

304

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 396, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 403.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 403.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle tothe dealer and have it repaired as soon aspossible. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 403 for the proper fluid to use.

305

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake mastercylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 317 for more information.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 309.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

306

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 403 for more information.

307

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it. The tankis located in theengine compartmenttoward the frontof the engine on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the COLD FILL line or a little higher. TheCOLD FILL line is near the bottom of the tank andsticks out from the rear of the tank.

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but only when the engine is cool.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, aspecial fill procedure is necessary. See CoolingSystem on page 312 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

308

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature warning lightand a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’sinstrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 187 andEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 188for more information.

309

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn engine coolant temperature warning canindicate a serious problem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 187.

If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,but see or hear no steam, the problem may notbe too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

310

If you get the engine coolant temperature warningwith no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

311

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Pressure CapB. Coolant Recovery TankC. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at or above the COLD FILL line. If it isnot, you may have a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.

312

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem

Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level in the coolant recovery tank is belowthe COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® enginecoolant at the coolant recovery tank. See EngineCoolant on page 306 for more information.

313

If no coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank,add coolant at the pressure cap as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at high speed.Never turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system and pressurecap to cool if you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

314

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thepressure cap whenthe cooling system,including thepressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.Turn the pressurecap slowlycounterclockwise.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left tobe vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap andremove it.

3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureto the coolant fill port, up to the base of theport. See Engine Coolant on page 306for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

315

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theCOLD FILL line.

6. Put the cap back on the coolant recoverytank, but leave the pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

8. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler port may be lower. If thelevel is lower, add more of the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture through the fillport until the level reaches the base ofthe fill port.

9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure, if coolant begins toflow out of the fill port, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tightand fully seated.

10. When the engine has cooled, check thecoolant in the coolant recovery tank. The levelin the coolant recovery tank should be atthe COLD FILL line when the engine is cold.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 298for reservoir location.

316

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 298 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

317

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 185.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

318

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Your rear drum brakes do not have wearindicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or changing.When you have the front brake pads replaced,have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

319

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. Youdo not need to access the battery to jump startyour vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 320.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 320 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

320

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

321

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not see the battery of your vehicleunder the hood. It is located in the trunk. Youwill not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal.

The remote positiveterminal is locatedunder a red tetheredcap on the enginecompartment fuse block.Remove the cap toaccess the terminal.

The remote negative (−)ground terminal, markedGND (−), is located atthe front of theengine compartment onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

322

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.



Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

323

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

324

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the dead battery.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)ground terminal marked GND (−).

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

325

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal (GND)

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

326

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aimthe headlamps as described in the followingprocedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its original location in thevehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

327

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 297 for more information.

2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beamheadlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

328

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. Do not placedirectly on the headlamp. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlamp beingadjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm hex socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise or lower the angleof the beam.

The top edge of the cut-off should bepositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Driver’s Side Shown

329

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 334.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps

A. HeadlampB. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

330

To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parkinglamp bulb, do the following:

1. Turn the wheel to access the wheel well.

2. Remove the fasteners to access the headlampand the turn signal/parking lamp bulbs.

3. Reach in behind the wheel well liner andlocate the bulb you need to change.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove.

5. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL)To replace the center high-mounted stoplampbulb, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 106for more information.

2. Remove the center trim located near the topof the liftgate.

331

3. Locate the bulb assembly.

4. Locate the bulb you wish to change.

5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove.

6. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn SignalB. Back-up

332

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 106 formore information.

2. Remove the cover in the rear cargo area ofthe vehicle to access the bulbs.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it out of the lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

5. Install a new bulb. When installing the bulbsocket into the assembly, line up the tabswith the slots in the bulb assembly.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.

333

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each ofthe license plate lamps to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp and CHMSL 921

Front Turn Signal andParking Lamp 3157KX

Headlamp High/Low-Beam H13

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

334

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 393 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper typeand length, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 405. Here’s how to remove thewiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, lift the clip upfrom the blade connecting point, and pull theblade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade on the wiperarm and press down on the clip to snap itinto place.

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement1. Remove the protective cap from the wiper

arm. If the protective cap is not removedbefore lifting the wiper arm, the wiperarm could be damaged.

2. Pull the wiper arm away from the backglassand into the service position.

3. Rotate the wiper blade, and pull down on it toremove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the new wiper blade, then set the wiperarm back into its original position and replacethe protective cap.

335

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 269.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 344.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

336

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

337

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 350.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 369 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 354.

Compact Spare Tire Example

338

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 344.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

339

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

340

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 344.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 269.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 269.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 269.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

341

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on lightduty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 269.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 344 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 269.

342

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 347.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 350.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 269.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 269.

343

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 269. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

344

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 369.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low, add air until youreach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 347and Wheel Replacement on page 352 formore information.

345

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 393.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 386.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355.

346

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

347

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 337 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not



handle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 369.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

348

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 269,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 347 andAccessories and Modifications on page 289 foradditional information.

349

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

350

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

351

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355 for moreinformation.

352

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used ona vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.



The area damaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose control of yourvehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash.

Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it foruse on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle,and do not spin your vehicle’s wheels.If you do find traction devices that willfit, install them on the front tires.

353

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

354

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.



To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the frontand rear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be the tireon the other side, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

355

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe jack, wheel wrench, and spare tire arestowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath thefloor of the cargo area. To remove the sparetire and tools, do the following:


2. Remove the cargo cover.

356

3. Turn the retainer counterclockwise to removethe tire cover.

4. Remove the tire cover.

5. Remove the spare tire by placing your handsat the four and eight o’clock positions. Gentlypull it up and out of the trunk. See CompactSpare Tire on page 369.

6. Remove the wing nut that holds the jack.Then remove the jack, wheel wrench, andflat tire strap.

357

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and wheel wrench (B).

You will need to turn the plastic wheel nutcounterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrenchfrom the jack.

358

Press the button and then pull on the end of thewheel wrench to extend the handle.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

359

2. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head tofit over the car flange under the down arrowmarkings on the rocker panel.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off thejack you could be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

360

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

361

4. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

5. Install the spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

362

6. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

7. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

8. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

363

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 386for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 386 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

364

10. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

365

Storing the Flat Tire and ToolsTo store the flat tire, do the following:


2. Put back all tools as they were stored in therear storage compartment and put thecompartment cover back on. For moreinformation, see “Storing the Compact SpareTire and Tools” next in this section.

3. Install the cargo cover. For more information,see Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Coveron page 144.

Aluminum Wheel

366

4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire asshown in the graphic

5. Attach the strap tothe cargo tie-downsin the rear of thevehicle.

6. Tighten the tie-down strap.

Steel Wheel

367

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand ToolsUse the following diagram as a guide for storingthe compact spare tire once you are done using it.

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Spare TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack and WheelWrench

F. StrapG. Bolt


2. Install the strap (F) on the floor of the sparetire compartment.

3. Place the jack and wheel wrench (E) over thebolt (G), making sure the strap is securelystored, under the jack and wheel wrench.

4. Secure the jack and wheel wrench (E) withthe wing nut (D).

5. With the valve stem up, place the sparetire (C) on the compartment floor.

6. Make sure the bolt (G) passes through thewheel center.

7. Install the spare tire cover (B).

8. Secure the spare tire and tools with theretainer (A).

The compact spare tire storage area is designedonly for the compact spare tire, the standardtire cannot be stored there.

368

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

369

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

370

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

371

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers onplastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protect softplastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

372

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 403.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 378. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

373

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 373.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 378.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

374

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

375

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

376

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

377

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

378

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

379

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Shouldyour headlamps fail to function, have yourheadlamp system checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opensprotecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

380

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of damagecaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one thathas the same amperage. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get alongwithout — like the radio or cigarette lighter — anduse its fuse if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floorconsole fuse block and the engine compartmentfuse block.

There are also one or two fuses located at theback of the vehicle near the battery.

Floor Console Fuse Block

The floor console fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the floor console behind theforward panel. The panel has four clips, one ineach corner. Pull the panel to disconnect the fourclips, and access the fuses. Use the fuse puller toremove fuses.

381

Fuses Usage

1 Fuse Puller

2 Empty

3 Empty

4 Empty

5 Empty

Fuses Usage

6 Amplifier

7 Cluster

8 Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+9 Stoplamp

10 Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning, PASS-Key® III+

11 Empty

12 Spare

13 Airbag

14 Spare

15 Windshield Wiper

16 Climate Control System, Ignition

17 Empty

18 Empty

19 Electric Power Steering,Steering Wheel Control

20 Sunroof

21 Spare

22 Empty

382

Fuses Usage

23 Audio System

24 Sensing and DiagnosticModule (Airbag)

25 Engine Control Module,Transaxle Control Module

26 Door Locks

27 Interior Lights

28 Steering WheelControl Illumination

29 Power Windows

Relays Usage30 Climate Control System31 Empty

32 Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment. Lift the coverto access the fuse/relay block.

Fuses Usage1 Electric Power Steering2 Rear Defogger3 Empty

383

Fuses Usage4 Body Control Module 35 Starting System6 Body Control Module 27 Empty8 Empty

9 Air ConditioningClutch Diode

10 Liftgate, Sunroof11 Empty12 Empty13 Fuel Pump20 Rear Wiper21 Mirror22 Air Conditioning23 Heated Seats (Option)25 Fuse Puller27 Empty29 Cigarette Lighter

Fuses Usage30 Power Outlet31 Daytime Running Lamps32 Empty33 Emissions36 Empty37 Power Seat (Option)40 Cooling Fan41 Engine Control Module42 Empty43 Engine Control Module, Transaxle44 Anti-lock Brake System (Option)45 Injectors, Ignition Module46 Park, Neutral47 Heated Seat, Back-up Lamps49 Windshield Washer Pump53 Fog Lamps (Option)56 Audio57 Anti-lock Brake System (Option)

384

Fuses Usage58 Windshield Wiper Diode59 Windshield Wiper60 Horn61 Anti-lock Brake System (Option)62 Instrument Panel, Ignition63 Driver’s Side High-Beam64 Canister Vent65 Driver’s Side Low-Beam66 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam67 Passenger’s Side High-Beam69 Parking Lamps

Relays Usage14 Rear Defogger Relay15 Air Conditioning Clutch16 Empty17 Rear Wiper18 Liftgate Release

Relays Usage19 Fuel Pump24 Empty26 Powertrain28 Daytime Running Lamps34 Starting System35 Empty38 Empty39 Windshield Washer Pump48 Rear Windshield Washer50 Cooling Fan51 Run, Crank52 Windshield Wiper54 Fog Lamps (Option)55 Horn68 Parking Lamps70 Windshield Wipers71 Headlamp Low-Beam72 Headlamp High-Beam

An OnStar® mini-fuse is located near the batteryin the rear of the vehicle.

385

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 405 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

2.2L Engine 7.4 qt 7.0 L

2.4L Engine Manual 8.7 qt 8.2 L

2.4L Engine Automatic 8.5 qt 8.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Fuel Tank 16.2 gal 61.3 L

386

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill) 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 1.7 qt 1.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 D AutomaticManual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

2.4L L4 P AutomaticManual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

387

✍ NOTES

388

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 390Introduction ............................................... 390Maintenance Requirements ........................ 390Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 391Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 391Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 393Additional Required Services ..................... 396Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 397

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 398At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 399At Least Once a Month ............................. 399At Least Once a Year ............................... 400Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 403Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 405Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 406Maintenance Record .................................. 407

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

389

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

390

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements. Soplease read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

391

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 269.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 291.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 393 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 396 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 397 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

392

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 430.

Owner Checks and Services on page 398 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 403 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 405.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

393

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 302 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that yourfirst service be Maintenance I, your secondservice be Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

394

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 299. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 302. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 304. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 345 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 399.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

395

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 304. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter (severe service only). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (m).

•

396

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steeringcables for proper hook-up, binding, cracks,chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

397

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 306 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 403.

398

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 299 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 306 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Donot forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 344. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 345.

399

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 127.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put theshift lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

400

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 127.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

401

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

402

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 299.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 306.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic Brake

SystemDelco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

HydraulicClutch System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ManualTransaxle

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

403

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ManualTransaxle Shift

Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

404

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22731072 A3054C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 52493319 CF125

Spark Plugs

2.2L and 2.4L Engines 12598004 41-103

Windshield Wiper Blade

Driver’s Side – 17.7 inches (45 cm) 15793205 —

Passenger’s Side – 17.7 inches (45 cm) 15793204 —

Rear Wiper Blade – 10.8 inches (27.4 cm) 22709463 —

405

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines

406

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 390.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 398 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

407

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



408




409




410

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 412Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 412Online Owner Center ................................. 415Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 416Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 416GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 417Roadside Assistance Program ................... 418Courtesy Transportation ............................. 421Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 423Collision Damage Repair ........................... 424

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 428Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 428Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 429Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 429Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 430

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

411

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

412

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

413

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In theevent that you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. GeneralMotors of Canada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaint to thefinal decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854(French), or you may write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

414

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

415

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

416

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

417

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres inCanada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered at nocharge if you are unable to gain entry into yourvehicle. If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership. Inthe U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

418

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

419

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

420

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

421

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed whileyou wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMhelps to minimize your inconvenience by providingseveral transportation options. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

422

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for

airbag deployment and, if the vehicle has theAnti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provide anti-lockbraking and to help the driver control the vehicle indifficult driving situations. Some information may bestored during regular operations to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions; other information isstored only in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision.This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

423

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, andsafety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

424

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

425

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

426

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 418 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

427

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.

In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

428

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

429

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

430

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

431

✍ NOTES

432

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 289Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 169Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 89Additives, Fuel ............................................ 292Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 380Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 304Air Conditioning ........................................... 170Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 182Readiness Light ....................................... 181

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 423

Airbag System ............................................... 71Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 79Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 88What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 80When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 77Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 74

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 236

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 236

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 243Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 186Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 375Care of Safety Belts ................................ 373Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 377Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 374Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 370Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 371Finish Care .............................................. 374Finish Damage ......................................... 377Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 372Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 376Tires ........................................................ 376Underbody Maintenance ........................... 377Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 378Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 373Weatherstrips ........................................... 373Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 375

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 170Audio System(s) .......................................... 206

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 234Care of Your CD Player ........................... 235Care of Your CDs .................................... 235

433

Audio System(s) (cont.)Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 236Radio with CD ................................ 210, 215Setting the Time .............................. 207, 208Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 233Understanding Radio Reception ............... 234XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 236

Automatic Door Lock ................................... 105Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 165Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 305Operation ................................................. 122

BBattery ........................................................ 320

Electric Power Management ..................... 168Run-Down Protection ............................... 168

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 260Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 243Emergencies ............................................ 245Parking .................................................... 127System Warning Light .............................. 185

Brakes ........................................................ 317Braking ....................................................... 242Braking in Emergencies ............................... 245

Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 115Bulb Replacement ....................................... 330

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 331

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 330Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 327Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 330License Plate Lamps ................................ 334Replacement Bulbs .................................. 334Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 332Buying New Tires ........................................ 347

CCalibration .......................................... 134, 136California Fuel ............................................. 292California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 290Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 386Carbon Monoxide ...................... 106, 132, 264,

276, 277Care ofSafety Belts ............................................. 373Your CD Player ........................................ 235Your CDs ................................................. 235

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 226

434

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) .................................. 331

Chains, Tire ................................................. 353Charging System Light ................................ 184Check

Engine Light ............................................ 188Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 296Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 377Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children ............................................ 56Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 63Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 66Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 170Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 375Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 374Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 371Finish Care .............................................. 374Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 370

Cleaning (cont.)Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 372Tires ........................................................ 376Underbody Maintenance ........................... 377Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 373Weatherstrips ........................................... 373Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 375

Climate Control System ............................... 170Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 175Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 174

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 306Collision Damage Repair ............................. 424Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 369Compass ............................................ 134, 136Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 111Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 242Convenience Net ......................................... 147Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 188Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 187Heater, Engine ......................................... 121

Cooling System ........................................... 312Cruise Control ............................................. 160Cupholder(s) ................................................ 143

435

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 421Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 416Customer Assistance Offices .................... 416Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 412GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 417Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 429Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 429Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 428Roadside Assistance Program .................. 418Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 430

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 164Defensive Driving ........................................ 238Delayed Locking .......................................... 104Disc, MP3 ................................................... 226Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 290Dome Lamp ................................................ 167

DoorAutomatic Door Lock ................................ 105Delayed Locking ...................................... 104Locks ....................................................... 103Power Door Locks ................................... 104Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 105Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 194DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 195DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 200DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 254City .......................................................... 258Defensive ................................................. 238Drunken ................................................... 239Freeway ................................................... 259Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 262In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 256Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 269Winter ...................................................... 264

436

EElectric Power Management ........................ 168Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 380Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 383Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 381Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 381Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 380Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 380Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 380

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 304Battery ..................................................... 320Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 188Coolant .................................................... 306Coolant Heater ......................................... 121Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 188Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 187Drive Belt Routing .................................... 406Engine Compartment Overview ................ 298Exhaust ................................................... 132Oil ........................................................... 299Oil Life System ........................................ 302Overheating ............................................. 309Starting .................................................... 119

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 246Warning Light ........................................... 187

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 167Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 423Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 304Finish Damage ............................................ 377Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 236Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 154Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 156Flat Tire ...................................................... 354Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 355Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 365Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 305Manual Transaxle ..................................... 305Windshield Washer .................................. 316

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 193Fog Lamps .................................................. 166Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 17Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Front Console Storage Area ........................ 143

437

Fuel ............................................................ 291Additives .................................................. 292California Fuel .......................................... 292Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 296Filling Your Tank ...................................... 294Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 293Gage ....................................................... 193Gasoline Octane ...................................... 291Gasoline Specifications ............................ 292

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 383Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 381Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 381Windshield Wiper ..................................... 380

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 188Fuel ......................................................... 193Speedometer ........................................... 179Tachometer .............................................. 179

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 291Specifications ........................................... 292

Glove Box ................................................... 143GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 417

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 154Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 327Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 380Headlamps .................................................. 163

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 165Bulb Replacement .................................... 330Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 164Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 156Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 330Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 330High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 156On Reminder ........................................... 164Wiper Activated ........................................ 164

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 170Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 193Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 261Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 262Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 296Release ................................................... 297

438

Horn ............................................................ 154How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 306

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 116Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 344Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 152Storage Area ............................................ 143

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 166Cluster ..................................................... 178

JJump Starting .............................................. 320

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 97Keys ............................................................. 95

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 337Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 168Dome ....................................................... 167Electric Power Management ..................... 168Fog .......................................................... 166Mirror Reading ......................................... 168Rear Reading .......................................... 168

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 56

License Plate Lamps ................................... 334Liftgate ........................................................ 106Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 181Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 186Brake System Warning ............................. 185Charging System ..................................... 184Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 187Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 187Fog Lamp ................................................ 193Highbeam On .......................................... 193Malfunction Indicator ................................ 188Oil Pressure ............................................. 192

439

Light (cont.)Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 182Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 180Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 180Security ................................................... 193

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 167

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 269Lockout Protection ....................................... 106Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 105Delayed Locking ...................................... 104Door ........................................................ 103Lockout Protection ................................... 106Power Door ............................................. 104Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 105Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

Loss of Control ........................................... 253Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 396At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 399At Least Once a Month ............................ 399At Least Once a Year .............................. 400

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Introduction .............................................. 390Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 397Maintenance Record ................................ 407Maintenance Requirements ...................... 390Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 405Owner Checks and Services .................... 398Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 403Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 393Using ....................................................... 391Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 391

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 188Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 305Operation ................................................. 125

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197

Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 168Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass .............................................. 136

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 134

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 134Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 138Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 138

440

MP3 ............................................................ 226MyGMLink.com ............................................ 415

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 115Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 405

OOdometer .................................................... 179Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 251Oil

Engine ..................................................... 299Pressure Light .......................................... 192

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 302Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 415OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 139Other Warning Devices ................................ 154Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 174Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 169Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 138Power Mirrors .......................................... 138

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 398Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 377Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 128Shifting Out of ......................................... 130

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 127Over Things That Burn ............................ 131

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 130Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 182Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 175Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82Passing ....................................................... 251PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 113PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 114Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 169Door Locks .............................................. 104Electrical System ..................................... 380Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 119Seat ............................................................ 9Windows .................................................. 110

Pressure Cap .............................................. 309Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 105

441

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 24

RRadios ........................................................ 206

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 235Care of Your CDs .................................... 235Radio with CD ................................ 210, 215Setting the Time .............................. 207, 208Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 233Understanding Reception ......................... 234

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..... 144Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 105Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 168Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Storage Area ...................................... 143Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 159Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 136Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 134Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 134Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 11

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 403Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 274Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 97Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation ..................................... 98Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 359Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 356Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 334Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 429General Motors ........................................ 429United States Government ....................... 428

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 91Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 119Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 418Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 269Roof Rack System ...................................... 146Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 406Running the Engine While Parked ............... 133

442

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 180Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 180

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 373Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 393Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10

Seats (cont.)Manual ........................................................ 8Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seat ................................................. 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 17

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 63Right Front Seat Position ........................... 66

Security Light .............................................. 193Service ........................................................ 289

Accessories and Modifications .................. 289Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 291California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 290Doing Your Own Work ............................. 290Engine Soon Light ................................... 188Publications Ordering Information ............. 430

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 88Setting the Time ................................. 207, 208Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 376Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 128Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 130Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 156

443

Spare TireCompact .................................................. 369Installing .................................................. 359Removing ................................................ 356Storing ..................................................... 365

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 386Speedometer ............................................... 179Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 17Starting Your Engine ................................... 119Steering ...................................................... 248Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 234Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 155Storage Areas

Convenience Net ..................................... 147Cupholder(s) ............................................ 143Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 143Glove Box ................................................ 143Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 143Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover .......................................... 144Rear Storage Area ................................... 143Roof Rack System ................................... 146

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 268Sun Visors .................................................. 111Sunroof ....................................................... 147

TTachometer ................................................. 179Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 332

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 233Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 111

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 111PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 113PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 114

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 155Tires ........................................................... 336

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 375

Buying New Tires ..................................... 347Chains ..................................................... 353Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 355Cleaning .................................................. 376Compact Spare Tire ................................. 369Different Size ........................................... 349If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 354Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 344Inspection and Rotation ............................ 345Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 359Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 359

444

Tires (cont.)Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 356Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 365Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 337Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 340Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 350Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 351Wheel Replacement ................................. 352When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 347

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 274Towing a Trailer .............................. 276, 277Your Vehicle ............................................. 274

TractionEnhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 246Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 187Transaxle

Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 305Fluid, Manual ........................................... 305

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 122Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 125Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 156Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 155

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 234Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 350

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 242Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 269Parking Your ............................................ 130Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 423

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 379Service Parts Identification Label .............. 379

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 200

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 174Visors .......................................................... 111

445

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 177Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 197Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 154Other Warning Devices ............................ 154Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 351Different Size ........................................... 349Replacement ............................................ 352

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53Windows ..................................................... 109

Power ...................................................... 110Windshield

Washer .................................................... 158Washer Fluid ........................................... 316Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 335

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 375Wiper Fuses ............................................ 380Wipers ..................................................... 157

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 159Winter Driving ............................................. 264Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 164

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 232XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 236

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 391

446

Documents

2007 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2007 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M 1. ... CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, ... Part No. 15865148 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors